Download Samsung PL120 دليل المستخدم

page
1
page
2
page
3
page
4
page
5
page
6
page
7
page
8
page
9
page
10
page
11
page
12
page
13
page
14
page
15
page
16
page
17
page
18
page
19
page
20
page
21
page
22
page
23
page
24
page
25
page
26
page
27
page
28
page
29
page
30
page
31
page
32
page
33
page
34
page
35
page
36
page
37
page
38
page
39
page
40
page
41
page
42
page
43
page
44
page
45
page
46
page
47
page
48
page
49
page
50
page
51
page
52
page
53
page
54
page
55
page
56
page
57
page
58
page
59
page
60
page
61
page
62
page
63
page
64
page
65
page
66
page
67
page
68
page
69
page
70
page
71
page
72
page
73
page
74
page
75
page
76
page
77
page
78
page
79
page
80
page
81
page
82
page
83
page
84
page
85
page
86
page
87
page
88
page
89
page
90
page
91
page
92
page
93
page
94
page
95
page
96
page
97
page
98
page
99
page
100
page
101
page
102
page
103
page
104
page
105
page
106
page
107
page
108
page
109
page
110
page
111
page
112
page
113
page
114
page
115
page
116
page
117
page
118
page
119
page
120
page
121
page
122
page
123
page
124
page
125
page
126
Transcript 
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ä‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪User Manual‬‬
‫‪PL120/PL121‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ — ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻃﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬ﻡ‪ ٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ— ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﻨًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪ -/+‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ُﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ًﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻃﻼﻗ ًﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ُﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬
‫‪ Mac‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Apple‬‬
‫‪.Corporation‬‬
‫™‪ microSD‬ﻭ ™‪ microSDHC‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD Association‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫”‪ “OpenSourceInfo.pdf‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪] ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫“‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ؛‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ s‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Contrast Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Exposure Bracket‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪) Auto Focus‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪) Digital Image Stabilization‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪Digital Print Order Format‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪) Exposure Value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ(‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪International Organization for Standardization‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ(‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ DIS‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) .s‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺎً‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) .s‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻞء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪) .(ACB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦١‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٥ e‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٣ e‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٤٤ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ( ‪٥١ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٦ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥١ e‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ‪٥٢ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫• ‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ﻧﺺ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٥٣ e‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﺤﺮﻱ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪٣٦ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٦٥ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ( ‪٦٨ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪٢٨ e (DIS‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ,‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪٦٤ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ‪٥٢ e‬‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٦٠ e‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ( ‪٦١ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٦١ e‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٦٤ e‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻴﻖ ‪٧٢ e‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٧٣ e‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٧٤ e‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٧٦ e‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٦ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٨٧ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٩٦ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٧ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٩٨ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٩٨ e‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪١١٠ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٣٢ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪٣٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ ‪٣٤ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪٣٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ‪٣٨ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٩ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٤٠ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٤١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٤٣ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٣ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٤٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ ‪٤٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪٤٥ ........................................... .‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٢ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪١٣ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٧ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٧ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٧ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪١٨ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪٢٠ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٢١ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٢٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٢٣ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٢٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪٢٨ ...................................................... (DIS‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ‪٢٩ .................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٧ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪٤٨ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪٤٨ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٩ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪٥٠ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ‪٥١ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥١ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥١ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٥٢ ................................................................ ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٥٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٥٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٥٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪٥٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٧ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥٧ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )ﻧﺠﻤﻲ( ‪٥٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٦٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً )‪٦٠ ...................................................... (EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪٦١ ................................................ (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٦١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٦٢ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪٦٩ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٠ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٧ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٧٨ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٨٠ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٨٠ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٨١ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪٨٤ ................................................. (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٨٧ .............................................. Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٨٨ ........................................... Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪٩٠ ...................‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٩١ ..................... (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٩٢ ....................................................... Mac‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٩٣ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٥ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٩٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٩٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪٩٧ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٨ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٠ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٠١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٢ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ‪١٠٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٠٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٠٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪١١٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١١٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١١٧ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٢٢ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫………………………………… ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ …………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ …………………………………… ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ………………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ……………………… ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ……………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ………………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ………………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ……………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ …………………………………… ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ……………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ……………………………………… ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ …………………………… ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ………………………………………… ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫…………………… ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫…… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪/‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻﻗﺮﺹ ﻻﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻠﻞ ﻻﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[P‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﺄ‬
‫• ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [P‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Language‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪DST‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪Intelli‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[t‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [f‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[c‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ← ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪3/2/1‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.S‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٩‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻔﺰﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺬﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻔﺰ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻔﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﺰﺍﺗﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭﻙ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻌﻔﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.AF‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪Intelli‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪Intelli‬‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ،Intelli‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ .Intelli‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ .Intelli‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ،Intelli‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪Intelli‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪Intelli‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.AF‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ .٣:٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ،Intelli‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ Intelli‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻤﺘﻮ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺯﻭﻡ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪.Intelli‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪.Intelli‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DIS‬ﺇﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬‫ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‬‫ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ‪.DIS‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.DIS‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻞء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﻣﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﻴﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ……………………… ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ……………………………… ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ …………………… ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ …………………… ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ……………………… ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ …………………………… ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫…………………………… ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ………………………………… ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫……………………… ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫……………… ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ……………………… ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ …………………………… ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ ……………………… ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪٤٥ …………… .‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫………………………… ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ …………………………… ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ………………… ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻔﻴﺪًﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.S‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻏﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬
‫ﻼ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻴ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻴ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،S‬ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﺤﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[m‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﺤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ← s‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﺤﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ← s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ← s‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﻭﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣X‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ← s‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪ .1280 X 720‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ١١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ،1280 X 720‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MJPEG‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.v‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ً‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ »ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ«‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ »ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ« ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٤٧‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻏﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[POWER‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺬﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻘﻔﺰﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﺰﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Samsung‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) .Intelli-studio‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٨٩‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ www.samsung.com‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻔﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻔﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٢‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺻﻮﺕ ← ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺻﻮﺕ ← ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟـ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ………………………… ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ……………………………… ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ……………………………… ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ………………………………… ‪٥٦‬‬
‫…………………………… ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ …………………………… ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ …………………………………… ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ………………………………… ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء …………………………… ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ………………………………… ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٥٢ …………………………… ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫……………………………… ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ………………………………… ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ………………………… ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ……………………… ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ …………………………… ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ …………… ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )ﻧﺠﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫………… ‪٥٩‬‬
‫…………………………… ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً )‪٦٠ ……………………… (EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪٦١ ………………… (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ……………………………… ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( …………… ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ …………………… ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ……………………… ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ……………………… ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ …………………………………… ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ً‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ :1920 X 1080‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A5‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )‪(٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(HDTV‬‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺍﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ :1984 X 1488‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ :4320 X 3240‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A1‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2880‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A1‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )‪.(٢:٣‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2432‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A2‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )‪(٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3648 X 2736‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A3‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.HDTV‬‬
‫‪ :640 X 480‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :320 X 240‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2592 X 1944‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A4‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪vspS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻻﻣﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ »ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪«.‬‬
‫‪spS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[F‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻀﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎً ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻞء‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪:‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻀﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[c‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٢ - ٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٨٠ - ٥‬ﺳﻢ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ٥٩ - ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ]‪ ١٥٠-١٠٠‬ﺳﻢ[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ← ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.AF‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‬‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺨﻂ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ :AF‬ﺭﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ :AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻤﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻌﺎ ً‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﺒﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ← ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟ ًﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻤﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ← ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟ ًﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ← ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪) .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٥٩‬‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎً ﻣﺴﺠ ً‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )ﻧﺠﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ FR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ← ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ FR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[f‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[f‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻢ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ٥‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً )‪(EV‬‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪(٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻊ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ٣‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ‪.EV‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(ACB‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ‪.ACB‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ACB‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.AEB‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،Auto WB‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ :H‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ :L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻫﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻉ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ٦ VGA‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪:AEB‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ٣‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ،ACB‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،VGA‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪vp‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.Lomo‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ :RGB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﺩ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :2‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ :RGB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺫﻭ ﺩﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻘﻞ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.Lomo‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪:RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،ACB‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ،Intelli‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٨٧ ……………… Windows‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ………………………… ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٨٨ …………… Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ………………………………… ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ …………………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ …………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ …………………………… ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٩١ (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ……………………………………… ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٩٢ ……………………… Mac‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ……………………………… ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٩٣ ………… PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ …………………………………… ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ……………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ …………………………………… ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪٨٤ ………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ……………………… ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮ ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ )ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪) .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺷﺨﺼﺎً(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮ ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Smart Album‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[f‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Yes‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ← ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ← ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [o‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻞ*‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺣﻠﺔ‪ ,‬ﺗﻼﺷﻲ(‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻀﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻞ(‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[o‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ »ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ«‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[F‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[c‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[F‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[c‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺛﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪˚90‬‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ :1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ :2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ :RGB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.Lomo‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪:RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ‪.ACB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(DPOF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MISC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.DPOF‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ← ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ← ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪.DPOF 1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،Intelli-studio‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CPU‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ ،Intel Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٦ AMD Athlon™ FX‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪RAM‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،Windows XP SP2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ DirectX 9.0c‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪،Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻼ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻫﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪ 1024×768‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪١٦‬‬
‫)ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 1280 X 1024‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺖ ّ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ATI X1600/‬‬
‫‪ series‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0c‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪،Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪.Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Run iStudio.exe‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Help “ Help‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ Web Support “ Update Intelli-studio “ Start Update‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Web Support “ Upgrade firmware for the connected device‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ »ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ«‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Tool “ Install Intelli-studio on PC‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) MP4 :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(MJPEG) AVI ،(WMV 7/8/9) WMV ،(AAC :‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪TIFF ،PNG ،BMP ،GIF ،JPG :‬‬‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫^‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫!‬
‫@‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ )ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Flickr‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(YouTube‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ »ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ«‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫@‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫^‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪My‬‬
‫‪ ،Folder‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫“‪My Computer “ Removable Disk “ DCIM‬‬
‫‪.100PHOTO‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Intelli-studio‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Mac‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ← ‪ ← USB‬ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[P‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫»ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [F‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ …………………………………………………‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ …………………………………‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ………………………………………………………‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ………………………………………‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫……………………………………………………‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ……………………………………………………‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) .USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪(5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺟﺮ(‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻔﺎً ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍً ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛـ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪) .‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ*(‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫]‪ [POWER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ*‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫•‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻓﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪) .‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 100PHOTO‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪.SAM_0001‬‬
‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ‪SAM_0001‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.SAM_9999‬‬
‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.999PHOTO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪.٩,٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪Design‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ .(DCF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﺪًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ 3 ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ*‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ 10 ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫• ‪) PAL‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ BDGHI‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﻠﺘﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﻮء ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ*‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ …………………………………………………… ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ………………………………………………… ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ……………………………………………… ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ …………………………………… ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ……………………………………… ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ …………………………………………… ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ……………………………………… ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ……………………………………………… ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ……………………………………………… ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ………………………………………………………… ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.microSDHC‬‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .DCF‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ FAT‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻘﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌُﺚ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ّ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻫﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻨﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻲء ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻼﺝ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻜﺔ ﺟﻠﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺰﻳﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) microSD‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪microSDHC‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪30 FPS‬‬
‫‪15 FPS‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٤٥‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪٣٧٤‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪٣٢١‬‬
‫‪٤٦٤‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫‪٤٣٨‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣٩١‬‬
‫‪٥٨٨‬‬
‫‪٧٧٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٦٣٧‬‬
‫‪٨٤٦‬‬
‫‪١٠٦٥‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٨٨٢‬‬
‫‪١١٤٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٠٤‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٦٢٦‬‬
‫‪١٧١٦‬‬
‫‪١٩٣١‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"١٤ '٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"٢٧ '٩‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"٤٤ '٣٣‬‬
‫‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"٢١ '٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"١٦ '١٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪"١٢ '٦١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ُﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،p‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ،14M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻞء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫‪BP70A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٤٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪ ٧٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ* )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.30 FPS‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﻴﺒﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ١٠٤/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻭﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﺤﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺎﺗﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬‫ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٥٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻭﻧﺎ ﻭﻏﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ ١٤٠‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻬﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻜﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪٣٢/‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ُﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ُﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.(DCF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Intelli-studio‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Start → My Computer‬‬
‫‪ → Intelli-studio → iStudio.exe‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٢٫٣/١‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٧٫٧٦‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ‪CCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪ ١٤٫٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ٤٫٧ = Samsung f‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٢٣٫٥ -‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ٢٦ :‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ١٣٠ -‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪F-stop‬‬
‫‪(T) ٥٫٩F - (W) ٣٫٣F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪٥٫٠X-١٫٠X :‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪(٢٥٫٠X :‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٣٫٥X-١٫٠X :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ٢٫٧ :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٦٫٩‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠) QVGA‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ١٫٥ :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ٣٫٨‬ﺳﻢ( ‪TFT LCD / K ٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ TTL‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ AF‬ﺩﺪﻌﺘﻣ ‪ AF،‬ﺰﻛﺮﻣ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ ،AF‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )‪(T‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٨٠ -‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ١٥٠ -‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١-٨/١ :‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١-١ :‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١-٨ :‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ٢ :‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪ ٣/١ EV) EV٢±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬
‫‪) ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(3M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﻞء‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ٠٫٢ :‬ﻡ ‪ ٣٫٤ -‬ﻡ )‪(ISO Auto‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ١٫٠ :‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫٩ -‬ﻡ )‪(ISO Auto‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺙ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،1‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪،2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،3‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﺤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪AEB ،‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،H‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،L‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻉ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪) MJPEG :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ١١ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ 1280 X 720 HQ :‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ 640 X 480 ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 320 X 240‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪15 FPS ،30 FPS :‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻀﻤﻦ(‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ*‬
‫*ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،ACB ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،2‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :microSD‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪PictBridge 1.0 ،DPOF 1.1 ،EXIF 2.21 ،DCF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪(DCF) JPEG :‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) AVI :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،MJPEG :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(PCM :‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪WAV :‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪4320 X 3240‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٤٥‬‬
‫‪4320 X 2880‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪٣٧٤‬‬
‫‪4320 X 2432‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪٣٢١‬‬
‫‪٤٦٤‬‬
‫‪3648 X 2736‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫‪٤٣٨‬‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪٣٩١‬‬
‫‪٥٨٨‬‬
‫‪٧٧٢‬‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪٦٣٧‬‬
‫‪٨٤٦‬‬
‫‪١٠٦٥‬‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪٨٨٢‬‬
‫‪١١٤٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٠٤‬‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫‪١٦٢٦‬‬
‫‪١٧١٦‬‬
‫‪١٩٣١‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ٢٩ :‬ﻡ ﺏ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) microSD‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) microSDHC‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠ - ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪) PAL ،NTSC :A/V‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻨًﺎ‪ ٤٫٢ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪٪ ٨٥ - ٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ٧٤٠ ،BP70A‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪٧٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ ١٨,٨ X ٥٤,٥ X ٩٤‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٠٢٫٥‬ﺟﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) DCF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪ Design‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Japan Electronics and Information‬‬
‫)‪.Technology Industries Association (JEITA‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DIS‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺿﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪EV ١٫٠-‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭ‪ EV ١٫٠‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪EV‬‬
‫‪) Exif‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Japan Electronic Industries Development‬‬
‫)‪.Association (JEIDA‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻄﺪﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪) CCD‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ( ﻭ‪CMOS‬‬
‫)ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫)‪JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ CCFL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )‪.(١:١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫)‪MJPEG (Motion JPEG‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻭُﺿﻌﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭُﺿﻌﺖ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻬﻤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻮﺵ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ )ﺣﻮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫)ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺑﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻀﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ Hg‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Cd‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Pb‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺩﻣﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .٦٦/٢٠٠٦ EC Directive‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺫﻱ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ‪ PlanetFirst‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٧ Intelli‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٩٢ Mac‬‬
‫‪٨٧ Windows‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪٢٨ (DIS‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٥٢ ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٩٦ AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٨٦ TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪٩٨ ،١٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٩٨ ،١٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺠﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺛﺒﺔ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ‪٥٥ AF‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٥٥ AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪١٤ A/V‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪١٤ USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺮﻱ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٩٢ Mac‬‬
‫‪٨٧ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪٦٤ (AEB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪٨٩ Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪٩٣ PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫يرجى مراجعة الضمان المصاحب للمنتج أو زيارة موقعنا ‪ http://www.samsung.com/‬للحصول على‬
‫خدمات ما بعد البيع أو في حالة وجود أي استعالمات‪.‬‬
Related documents
Remington S3500
Remington S3500
Samsung ST700 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST700 دليل المستخدم
Samsung PL150 دليل المستخدم
Samsung PL150 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST95 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST95 دليل المستخدم
Samsung WB210 دليل المستخدم
Samsung WB210 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST88 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST88 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST64 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST64 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST6500 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST6500 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST96 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ST96 دليل المستخدم
Samsung WB750 دليل المستخدم
Samsung WB750 دليل المستخدم
Samsung SMART CAMERA WB152F دليل المستخدم
Samsung SMART CAMERA WB152F دليل المستخدم
Samsung SMART CAMERA MV900F دليل المستخدم
Samsung SMART CAMERA MV900F دليل المستخدم
Samsung ES95 دليل المستخدم
Samsung ES95 دليل المستخدم